Home

Dodge 2008 DR/DH Ram Automobile User Manual

1. 00 140 Unleaded Gasoline llle 332 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 48 DOB TO 2cescab lb Rr 3OE dled don e 201 219 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses lesse 410 Vanity Mirrors ee y uos es Pera Ee 88 Variance Compass sssrds aniseed saasaa 192 Vehicle Certification Label 339 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading nn INDEX 481 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Veh cle Storage acc wat wae caine Res 258 428 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video SYSTEM sso od tetas ex eee ents 240 Viscosity Engine Oil lees 393 394 Warning Flasher Hazard 360 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster D scripti n Luces raien ea RE ERE de s 174 Warnings and Cautions 00 6 Warranty Information 453 Washer Adding Fluid 133 261 404 Washer Rear leen 260 Washers Windshield 130 132 404 Washing Vehicle s ges ces a na 417 Water Driving Through Wheel Alignment and Balance 319 Wheel and Wheel Trim lesen 418 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 418 Wheel Bearings sese 416 Wind Buffeting 0 0 00 eee eee 38 149 Window Airbag Side Curtain 53 59 Window Fogging 0 eee eee 258 WindOWS 644 oa04 64 Gs ona e
2. 00 288 s de oput ad Uis ne 301 eaa Maer S paspetepatipasteue aoe B Tite Safety Information eer rrr ys 302 W Parking Brake 22243 rie II RES 290 Who NaHS boca eet e pira edt calc 30 dci cr PNE 292 Tire Identification Number UIN soceectexs 306 An Tock Drake Spo eH EQUIDHGS sies ee Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 307 BEEOWORPESURE Genre pa apeeaeen eee aes ds am Bl Tires General Information 311 Tin bo MA M ii 7 nue er 296 Tire Pressure sce see Rer xx 311 Bl Traction Control System TCS If Equipped 296 Tire Inflation Pressures 312 ll Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 298 Radial Ply Ties 2e e ae RR 314 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 315 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 315 Tire SPINNING sce ripis Fred pterea e eg a 316 Tread Wear Indicators lees 317 Life Of Tires ene eo Y 317 Replacement Tires llle 318 Alignment And Balance 319 H Self Sealing Tires If Equipped 320 a lire Chains oes ir ER wen 320 MSnow Tires 22 1 g lem RR 321 Bi Tire Rotation Recommendations 321 li Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS If Equipped 22e DR e REIR 322 Base System If Equipped 325 Premium System If Equipped 327 General Information
3. 00006 51 Child Restraint llle 66 67 68 73 Extender 242229 eb eR Rex 51 Fr nt Seat 21222323 RR EE S eppi 42 43 Inspection ak oda wey RR Re EREE 78 Operating Instructions 040 43 Pretensioners 0 0 0 0 48 Rear Seat 4 23 0 6340 54 26 kia me nak 42 Reminder Cruce doc el nc RE D dC SO 178 Untwisting Procedure 05 48 erc RR T c ss a eae See 116 Adjustment ees ereis see uev wes 116 Head Restraints llle 120 Heated sz Re REX IER EA 120 Height Adjustment iliis 117 Lumbar Support ess rosinterrisi ispan is 119 POWO anda cee mx ER seati e ee Sa Rd 117 Rear Folding ie agcda obbew hese edaanas 122 Reclining 2m d ek eras 118 Seatback Release llle 122 THINS ie 9e x Re boas 117 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 182 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 406 438 Selection of Oil sarren sagene ESERE 393 Selt 5ealing Tires 2x eu RIETI 320 Sentry Key Immobilizer lille 15 Sentry Key Programming sess 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance llle 450 en INDEX 477 Service CONTACT seas Kaui ae hed Hel acne ae ROSA 452 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicato ieo 508 Gia 4 dosed Ok bie ho qe E PAR RE RR 184 Service Manuals 2 00002 ee eee 454 Setting the Clock 0 202 206 221 225 Settings Personal 0 000 0
4. 0 05 331 Mi Fuel Requirements 00004 332 2 LOB Ie s mya ans te Stet wee eee ec 332 3 5L And 5 7L Engines 00 0 Reformulated Gasoline Gasoline Oxygenate Blends MMT In Gasoline sees Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions 0 0 334 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 335 WM Adding Fuel 5 2 2 oe 336 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 336 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 338 Trailer Hitch Classification 346 Bi Vehicle Loading 000000 339 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Vehicle Certification Label 000000000 339 WOIBBERAUMSS sx tan ea tee iind Adeste ad Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 339 Trailer And Tongue Weight 349 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 340 Towing Requirements isses 350 Overloading rre seses pe I s 340 Towing E HBP Ld ditig E 341 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 357 M Trailer Towing 342 mom Me cw pie eh E ue Common Towing Definitions 342 Ground ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten you
5. 270 Floor Console ee eee 154 Fluid Brake eia 2 19 4 en deed oon eed 440 Fluid Capaciti s 0 cee soe eben een ees 436 Ehud Leaks eut Ae Gk eo ae tte RS 79 en INDEX 467 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 414 Brake siu tea due eek wok as BA I EE 413 Cooling System 1 6 6 eee 406 Engine Oi 2x 9 s n ans 391 392 Power Steering 6 eee eee eee eee 402 Transfer Case 2 0 415 Eluids anie ea ek beeen ge Bote ME eS 438 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 438 POS Lights 52e eme em 127 178 Folding Rear Seat 0 6 0 eee 122 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 005 376 Front Suspension Ball Joints 402 Front Wheel Bearings 00005 416 Fuel Aisne anaes iE IPLE Mt he ate e 332 Adding up deret edo tcp ici eant eda 336 Additives aoran hk v Sosy ob ROP euo ine 334 Clean Ait ced peren eee RC Od d HOPES 333 Consefving acea c ie edo c aani e e y 188 Ethanol Suo ise tectae Msn E NEAT 333 Filler Cap Gas Cap 000000004 336 Filtet etes bs We sels bras atk Sigs sake nans 396 Gasoline clear od et iE xen 332 Gauge coca ain be sacer au dde ce E 174 FOSES iiu he ab E ERR rus 41 Materials Added 000000 334 Methanol us bsg cage er Rx REC RE 333 Octane Ratne sss cad atone sca pend 332 438 Requirements 4 0 cio eek ER we eae oie a 332 Saver Mode spe cs cece sence ea cee e 188 OPCCHICAHONS 4 3
6. Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment 8199815e Opening the Rear Seat Video Entertainment System e The LCD Screen swings up from the rear of the armrest to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the e A diagonal seven inch liquid crystal display LCD display screen integrated into the center console armrest The screen features brightness control for optimum day time and nighttime viewing ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 8199818b VES Video Screen NOTE Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been raised to its viewing position e The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers e A battery powered infrared remote control that snaps into a molded compartment in
7. The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans fers of phonebook entries to use this feature 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will be use only the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom mended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phone book entry that you are editing After you
8. 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILAB
9. REAR 8138a5c6 Waterproof Liner Rear Attachment Points ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Cargo Organizer The optional cargo organizer can also be placed into the lower load floor Lift the handle and pull to open the cargo organizer 813895e6 Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when 81389562 vehicle is moving Cargo Organizer Handle 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear i axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a vehicle to sway child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seat to come loose A child could be badly injured seatback This could impair visibility or become a Use only the anchors provided for child seat dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision tethers WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for
10. When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds wh
11. loading your vehicle cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The roof luggage rack consists of side rails and adjustable crossbars The roof luggage rack is designed to carry up to 150 lbs 68 kg of cargo uniformly distributed over both crossbars When loading cargo on the roof luggage rack distribute the cargo weight evenly on the crossbars The roof luggage rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for more information about cargo and load capacity The placard is located on either the driver s side B pillar or the driver door To adjust remove or install the crossbars proceed as follows UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 2 81346b5b Roof Luggage Rack 1 Hip the lever on the end of the crossbar upward 2 Turn the lever counter clockwise to loosen the lower clamp When the lower clamp is loose turn it until the round side of the clamp completely faces away from the side rail 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e To avoid da
12. message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the right
13. 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned
14. Adjust Fan and bg Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 6 K 490 ae doa COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor J If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode Control to Defrost Floor LS Jor cae Defrost Sg as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 51352266 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Wiper Operation Nd The rear wiper is operated by the rear wiper washer switch The switch is located near the top center of the instrument panel An indicator in the switch illuminates when the rear wiper is on Rear Wiper Washer Switch To use the rear wiper push the left side of the rear wiper washer switch in and release The rear wiper system is intermittent and is not adjust able The delay is approximately 8 to 9 seconds between cycles CAUTION Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than OFF Rear Washer Operation The rear washer is operated by the rear wiper washer switch The switch is located near the top center of the instrument panel ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 To use the rear washer push the right side of the rear wiper washer switch in and hold while
15. The Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel system s hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake and Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive
16. The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the
17. This requirement may limit the ability to always before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a mation in this section for information on tread wear percentage of total trailer weight indicators and for the proper inspection procedure Towing Requirements Tires When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on replacement Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact P 5 P tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures SEES Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the limits Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake
18. including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The Brake Assist System BAS is standard on vehicles equipped with Electronic Stability Program ESP The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capa bility during emergency braking maneuvers The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver s braking style This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking power during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP IF This system enhances directional control and stability of EQUIPPED the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the The ESP Electro
19. 87 Heated 2 2 acude bac9 poe Sa ex 88 Outside 3s sime a as aves PRR ad Cr dos 86 Rearview llle 85 Vanity spd T aibi be dus bdo pa e Eee dde 88 Mode FuelSaver iade we fae oe uwEASA 188 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 322 Mopar Parts 5 222 02h bb re REOR SY 389 453 MRS Player iue bao eR 201 219 MTIBE EIBE 43A Yd Gade eet e Ce I 333 Multi Displacement Engine System 296 Multi Function Control Lever 05 127 Navigation Radio ss cte casaca oam nagas iaman 219 en INDEX 473 Navigation System ss csse 0 0 cece ee eee 219 New Vehicle Break In Period 75 Occupant Restraints 0 0 0 tiek 41 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 332 438 Odometer osea tud y Gd ace EARS 174 179 Trip se e429 9e e Soba 453 deh ws 174 179 Oil Change Indicator 0 179 188 Oil Change Indicator Reset 179 188 Oil Engine see ce e eR cule ET 391 438 Capacity uisi s muhdordand eL rer 436 Change Interval 00 179 188 393 Checking sete hb TERR RR RT PAS 391 392 Dipstick x nodos achat SAE an Bee ee 391 392 Disposal lt 24 44 2400 s esa es Bae eb 395 Filter paza perdere Ere Bie pte Sete UH ep 395 438 Filter Disposal store evo e Re e 395 Identification Logo llle 393 Materials Added to 0 00000 cea 394 Recommendation sn 393 436 SynthetiC uisa coa pP
20. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will here a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is no
21. For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least Y inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended t
22. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded STARTING AND OPERATING 341 GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING GVWR 2177 KG 4800 LBS Example Only 81346ed7 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE ONLY Front Rear Axle Axle Empty Weight 2054 Ibs 1805 Ibs 932 kg 819 kg Load Including driver pas 271 Ibs 579 Ibs sengers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg Total 2325 Ibs 2384 lbs 1055 kg 1081 kg GAWR 2546 Ibs 2708 lbs 1155 kg 1228 kg NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label at tached to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs This table is only an example TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The fo
23. ORC refer to information on Airbags in this section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert9 will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occu pants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deacti vating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start t
24. They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For
25. This feature is ideal for games laptops cell phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments With Vehicle Entertainment System VES The center console contains a large storage compartment The storage compartment contains a 12 volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins A slot in the top left and right side of the storage compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the compartment with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptops cell phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to the storage compartment for the both the driver and the front passenger Cargo Management System If Equipped The cargo area has an upper and lower load floor Additional innovative features in the cargo area are the two molded in bins in the quarter trim panels Each bin will hold a gallon of milk and a 2 liter bottle of pop A cargo management system that stores on the lower load floor below the bi level cargo floor is optional It includes the following equipment e Waterproof cargo floor liner e Folding cargo management container with net separa tors 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The bi level cargo floor includes a removable tri fold load bearing upper level Two folds in the panel allow it to be partially or fully
26. This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the selector lever in the D Drive position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the selector lever to the Left triggers a downshift and to the Right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indica tor You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting between the five available gears When you wish to engage Autostick simply move the selector lever to the Right or Left D D while in the D Drive position The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen en STARTING AND OPERATING 287 ALL WHEEL DRIVE IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time All Wheel Drive AWD with Anti lock Brake System ABS Traction Control The front wheels provide 38 of the torque and the rear wheels provide 62 of the torque The system is auto matic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Uneq
27. Trip Functions deese S RES 188 Compass Display lesen Telephone If Equipped Navigation If Equipped 195 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 238 ssa bbe Hae doas dde ax See wee 196 Bl Radio General Information 200 Radio Broadcast Signals 200 Two Types Of Signals 200 Electrical Disturbances 200 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se AM Reception FM Reception ll Sales Code REN Multimedia System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play ll Sales Code RER Multimedia System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure ll Sales Code R
28. emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use When adding coolant additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar they may not be compatible with the radiator Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula engine coolant and may plug the radiator HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propy lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of cool
29. garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Oper
30. mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries Push the Audio Select button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu If Equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button If Equipped me e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped e VES CH1 CH2 A
31. require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you en STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Although your vehicle i Although your vehicle is capable of driving through CAUTION shallow standing water consider the following before Always check the depth of the standing water before driving doing SO through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehi cle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appear ance after driving through standing water Do not continue to oper
32. tracks chapters SCROLL files etc depending on which radio is in the Button vehicle CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 81350206 Manual Temperature Controls 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se
33. 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 11 4 qts 10 8 liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 57 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System Mopar 14 7 qts 13 9 liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System Mopar 15 1 qts 14 liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 2 7 Liter Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 3 5 Liter Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7 Liter Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Spark Plugs 2 7L RE14PMCS5 Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Spa
34. 81341de7 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Defrost Sv Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Defrost Floor Qe Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets x and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor uf Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats e Bi Level gt e Air flows through the outlets located in the gh instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the in strument panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passen gers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning ro during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through th
35. A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 460 INDEX MM About Your Brakes less 290 292 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 293 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 407 Adding Fuel saadeta piediri e nete cca edhe 336 Adding Rear Washer Fluid 261 Adding Washer Fluid 133 261 404 Additives Fuel 0 0 00 cee ee nee 334 Adjustable Pedals 000 0005 135 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 396 Air Conditioner Maintenance 400 Air Conditioning isle 249 251 Air Conditioning Controls 249 Air Conditioning Filter 258 401 Air Conditioning Operating T
36. AND OPERATING 305 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you wil
37. Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visual signals the horn will pulse the headlights will flash the park lights will flash and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after 3 minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Arm the System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm Indicator light will flash If it does not illuminate the system is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the system will cancel the arming process If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert
38. Blower Control ERES S 81241942 The rotary knob on the left controls the blower The control has an OFF posi tion and four speed settings The blower will remain on until the con trol is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF Temperature Control 812d193c The rotary knob in the center controls air temperature Rotate the control to the left for cooler air temperature and to the right for warmer air tempera ture Rotating the control to the ex treme left provides the coldest setting Rotating the control to the extreme right provides the warmest setting 812d192f e Defrost W The rotary knob on the right controls airflow distribution Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the op erator to fine tune airflow distribu tion The mode settings are as follows Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles NOTE To improve fuel economy leave in defrost only when necessary e Defrost Floor tie Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets ugh and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor uf Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel
39. Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per formed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including seat tracks door hinges liftgate hinges and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice
40. HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the
41. NOTE The battery is stored under a hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in P Park and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine com partment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground REOR of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump s
42. OPERATING 351 WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
43. TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling i jacked hicle i i System Pressure Cap paragtapli Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363 Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas 2 Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK 3
44. TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME program format type to be selected Many radio stations do 16 Digit Character not currently broadcast Music Type information Program Type Display Toggle the Music Type button to select the following Nostalgia Nostalga format types Oldies Oldies 16 Digit Character Personality Persnlty Program Type Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined Religious Music Rel Musc Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type
45. The cup holders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants el bows Rear Seat Cup Holders 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M STORAGE Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases Without Vehicle Entertainment System VES Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest 1 Release button for bottom compartment 2 Release button for top compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment You can access this compartment directly without first exposing the upper compartment by oper ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins A slot in the left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed
46. Tongue Weight TW Tongue weight TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle 344 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Frontal Area Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control a
47. Turn OFF the ignition 4 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher Hazard Flasher Switch 5 Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under a hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack 1 Open the liftgate 2 Fold up the tri fold floor if equipped by lifting the handle Load Floor Handle ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365 3 Lift the access cover using the pull strap 4 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire 812c5587 Sess Lifting The Access Cover Spare Tire Fastener 5 Remove the spare tire 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or 6 Remove the fastener securing the jack hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Jacking and Changing a Tire 1 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 81b31802 Jack Fastener N
48. Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 200 Ibs 91 kg AWD amp 5 7L Auto 2 000 Ibs 907 kg matic 82 SQ FT 2 97 square meters Up to 3 persons amp Luggage 200 Ibs 91 kg 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 32 SQ FT 2 97 square meters Up to 4 persons amp Luggage 150 Ibs 68 kg 1 500 Ibs 680 kg 32 SQ FT 2 97 square meters Up to 5 persons amp NO Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg gage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 5 7L Automatic with 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 380 Ibs 172 kg trailer tow package 3 800 Ibs 1724 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters Up to 3 persons amp Luggage 300 Ibs 136 kg 3 000 Ibs 1361 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters Up to 4 persons amp Luggage 150 Ibs 68 kg 1 500 Ibs 680 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters Up to 5 persons amp NO Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg gage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
49. You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident D Overdrive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and down 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se shifts and the best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers NOTE e Ifthe vehicle is started in cold temperatures shifts into Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera ture Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section e If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en gage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The transmis sion will operate normally in First Second and Third while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing
50. a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Washers Rear Window Washer The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer syste
51. a Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn Be in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is
52. a at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your collision abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock Out This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the 60 rear seat back is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seat back is not fully latched NOTE e
53. a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the following limitations With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The gear selector must be in N Neutral the distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles 48 km and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans mission geartrain failure If the transmission is not op erative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed truck CAUTION e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km then the only approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck Damage to the transmission may result Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379 If you must use the accessories wipers defro
54. airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger Temperature Control knob Once the com fort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request ing the air conditioning is not necessary The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula
55. all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network
56. and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number w
57. be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc This vehicle may also be equipped with supplemental Window Airbag side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior sitting next to a window and or supplemental front seat trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment mounted side airbags 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat WARNING mounted side airbags they are marked with an SRS label sewn into the outboard side of the seat If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the seat airbags the per formance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating seat airbag could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags do
58. below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 44 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake At Each Oil Change master cylinder power steering and transmission m and add as needed e Change the engine oil filter e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct e Inspect the brake hoses and lines operation CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N m E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first M A l N T E N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 6 Rotate the tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions S inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if nec 12 000 20 000 12 E essary E Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 D Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 12 000 20 000 12 n Inspect the
59. calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voicemail systems have system timeout settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt
60. could You will want to have the airbags ready to be injured because the airbags are not there to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While protect you Do not modify the components or N the airbag system is designed to be mainte wiring including adding any kind of badges or nance free if any of the following occurs have stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers body structure or frame during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is You need proper knee impact protection in a first turned on collision Do not mount or locate any aftermar ket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster interval The light flickers or comes on and remains on while an authorized dealer service the system promptly The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone driving who works on your vehicle that it has airbags 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EE Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleratio
61. e tees ey de a as 292 411 Anti Lock ABS sage caecese e mcd 293 Fluid Check 0 0 0 0 00000 413 440 HoseS iix mob Ra e PRA awe oa 412 Master Cylinder llle 413 Parking x evecteseierkbererenehier ders 290 Warning Light 2 92 RR 180 292 Brakes 20 sitet acne dtes erue dires 292 411 Brake Transmission Interlock 274 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 75 Brightness Interior Lights 129 Bulb Replacement 0 00 429 430 Bulbs Light esre e RR RR ad RR 79 429 Calibration Compass llle 192 Capacities Fluid vua tee dne es wads 436 Caps Filler Fuel iu sia eser hehe one dune hs 336 Oil Engine ce RR Rm R6 393 394 Radiator Coolant Pressure 408 Car Washes eer y RR ES 417 Carbon Monoxide Warning 77 335 Cargo Compartment Luggage Cartier cse vtpote Roe Res 163 Cargo Management System iliis 155 Cargo Organizer os sessa eriei dr re ee 161 Rollaway Tonneau Cover liiis 158 Tri Fold Load Floor 0000 156 Waterproof Liner i230 ere e es 160 Cargo Tie DOWNS lt o teacsa ker adie hela d 161 Cargo Vehicle Loading 155 339 Catalytic Converter llle 397 CD Compact Disc Player 201 219 en INDEX 463 Cellular Phone 0 00000 eee 89 219 221 Certification Label cee eee 339 Chains Tite ves RE E RUE Yu 320 Changing A Flat Ti
62. edi nes 373 Multi Displacement lille 296 Oeae e PCR EA 391 436 438 HO 466 INDEX MM Oil Change Interval 179 188 393 Oil Filler Cap saccos esee m ie s 393 394 oil ANC C 395 Oil Filter Disposal 000000 395 Oil Selection llle 393 436 Oil Synthetic ues dy cepa sets te 394 Opera tION orsus cid ota tins iesu oe kv nes agen in 75 Overheating cees tentada ERE bones 361 Statin sassk a dae ene rb p EREE eS 267 Temperature Gauge 6 6 2 00 0000 175 Engine Oil Viscosity lesse 393 394 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 62 Entry System Illuminated 20 Ethanol 4mm Kaba Rae e ORE 333 Event Data Recorder is 04 wai cr Ru x 64 Exhaust Gas Caution 40 77 335 405 Exhaust System rs ce cda dese 2034 4 0444 77 404 Exterior Folding Mirrors 000 87 Exterior Lighting Exterior Lights ius icc ee kansat ank ae ROS ce 79 Filler Location Fuel 0 000000 ee 336 Filters Air Cleaner s3 lt gx gens caa a y ex baec RS 396 Air Conditioning 000 258 401 Engine Fuel 1 5 irons e Soy iate iaa 396 Engine Qil asr dea I RR RERO ERES 395 438 Engine Oil Disposal llle 395 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 00002 ises 360 Turn Signal 32 sy cee cee e beaters hs 79 128 176 Flash lo Pa S 6464 6 1 era u E Tende 128 Flat Tire Changing el RR IRR 362 Flooded Engine Starting
63. files are not supported 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return t
64. folded for storage flexibility Shallow items can be stored underneath the upper load floor The lower load floor is hinged to provide access to the spare tire if equipped battery and rear electrical power distribution center The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the removable tri fold load floor Tri Fold Upper Load Floor The removable tri fold upper load floor has two different surfaces for increased utility One side is carpeted for a plush appearance and the other side is covered with vinyl for easy cleaning The panel sandwiched between the carpet and the washable vinyl is constructed from a strong lightweight material that gives the floor its load bearing strength You can place the load floor in a partially folded position a fully folded position or a flat position You can also remove it from the vehicle Folding and or removing the load floor will add four inches to the height of the cargo area for increased utility Use the handle to adjust the position of the load floor The load floor positions are shown in the following illustrations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Load Floor Handle Load Floor Partially Folded 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rollaway Tonneau C
65. hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range others could be badly burned by steam or boiling CAUTION coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on 9 Turn Signal Indicators the H and you hear a chime turn the engine off lt The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal immediately and call for service when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on NOTE Check for a defective outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate See page 128 for more information 10 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for 6 to 8 seconds as a 9 bulb check when the ignition switch is first N turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at y
66. ing front seat mounted side airbag pushes through the seam in the seat s trim cover and opens into the space between the occupant and the door The airbag inflates at a very high speed and with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the front seat mounted side airbag inflates This especially applies to children The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not make any modifications to the front seat components assembly or to the seat cover in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being re paired Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint sys tem SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front seat assembly its related components or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag de ployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat passenger if the vehicle is invo
67. l4 pe x E ad d d Y E 147 M ndOoWS sene re eae aie Batis de an eds 35 Power Steering Fluid 0 402 440 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 51 Preparation for Jacking 00 363 Pretensioners Seat Belts os Lese e dp eee a ey RR e 48 Programmable Electronic Features 196 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless EDITY iia to onion set tos aie eRe es 20 Radial Ply Tires 1er re mes 314 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 408 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 200 Radio Navigation llle 219 Radio Operation 0 202 221 249 Radio Remote Controls 0005 247 Radio Satellite 201 202 219 221 236 Radio Sound Systems 201 219 Rear Cup Holder 52 ee Res 153 nn INDEX 475 R athittgate sas ss sain de ve acto we asta Sica 39 Rear Seat Folding eere Satta d hea es 122 Rear Washer Fluid llle 261 Rear Wheel Bearings 0 000005 416 Rear Window Defroster less 262 Rear Window Features 200000008 260 Rear Wiper Washer ees 260 Rearview Mirrors 0 0000 85 Reception Radio necs ca nieee eee 200 Reclining Front Seats 0 000 118 Recorder Event Data 0 0 00 ee 64 Recreational Towing 0000000 357 Reformulated Gasoline 0 0000 nee 333 Retrigerant ise surg ends an ERRORS eR a 40
68. loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Autostick If Equipped For vehicles equipped with Autostick By using the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed es STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Pro cedures in Section 7 of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHA
69. make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phone book to learn how to store a name in the phone book e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the cor
70. more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step INFO Button Radio Mode Press
71. of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C E LOAD 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL U AUX 8189f8f9 REQ Radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 O
72. on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words GPS Time are displayed The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the t
73. on salted or dusty roads or if you drive e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once and to protect your paint finish Take care never to a month tch th int iae MU e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing of the doors rocker panels and rear cargo area be kept that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint clear and open finish e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosio
74. or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE CAUTION If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery e When installing the Power Distribution Center You may cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center and possibly result in an electrical system failure e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lights W5W Rear Compartment Liftgate Light 578 Overhead Console Reading Ligh
75. ra i bed 394 VISCOS iE ps dg uet pp eR s 393 394 436 Oil Filter Change srinata a eee 395 Oil Filter Selection 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee 395 Onboard Diagnostic System 387 388 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 140 Operating Precautions 0005 387 Outside Rearview Mirrors lise 86 Overdrive inwy paaa yale VEA YN eee es 277 Overhead Console lille 139 Overheating Engine lille 176 361 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 454 Paint Cate 2372 as edd eae es e pros ERU S 416 Patti Alarm xdg do ed Eder is Baan deg As 24 Parking Brake x si oid ee b ERES 290 Parking On Hill doce atk ae eee S 291 Passing Light iota a seus ema ue daknss 128 HO 474 INDEX aa Pedals Adjustable 000005 135 Personal Settings uu eere C3 erp es 196 Pete tur Gk bho ade We PX RU RR E s 75 Phone Cellular 89 219 221 Phone Hands Free UConnect 89 219 221 Placard Tire and Loading Information 307 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 201 219 USB i222 Soe a BS Ee ad ES e Manes 201 219 Power Brakes xdg 9e Rede eddie be SEA 292 Distribution Center Fuses 421 Door Locks 2 222 9 2 m eee ewes 30 MIEEOTS ce anra Rus a he ee RU 87 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 150 n M TC 117 Steering 2i a nda dart P do dore ie PSS 295 Steering Checking ses de tc enn 402 SunfOO
76. radio is in the vehicle For details refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Channel Transmit Channel Training Channel Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details e Oil Change Required with a single chime Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an e
77. rear axle fluid 18 000 30 000 18 E m mer S Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months 24 000 A i 8 Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspec tion at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months AANU iud ui Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals and replace if necessary 446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 Inspect the transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive AWD 30 000 50 000 30 Replace the spark plugs on 5 7L engines 30 000 50 000 30 Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or fre 48 000 80 000 48 quent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police 60 000 100 000 60 taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 any of the following police taxi fleet off road or fre 60 000 100 000 60 quent trailer towing All Wheel Drive AWD Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary 90 000 150 000 90 Flush and replace the engine co
78. rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse and Drive Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle For details refer to Electronic Stability Program or Traction Control Sys tem in this manual E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 CAUTION WARNING e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener tween First and R Reverse do not spin the ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain age or failure A tire could explode and injure some damage may result one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with
79. same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Commu nication UConnect in Section 3 for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect
80. show that the speed control sys ON OFF button again The system and the indicator light will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever down and release SET DECEL Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e Speed control will only function in third fourth or fifth gear when in the Autostick Mode if equipped The speed control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Depress the brake pedal 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Pull the speed control lever toward you CANCEL Pushing and releasing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To d
81. steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible 2906 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS IF SEIEN EQUIPPED Prol d ti f the steeri t tth d rolonged operation of the steering system at the en WARNING of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering The Traction Control System TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve hicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent accid
82. subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun NING visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too 81351e5e Do not allow small children to operate the sun Power Sunroof Controls roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may
83. swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE e Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cyl
84. systems The HomeLink unit operates off of your vehi cle s battery NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHAN NELS Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to
85. the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit tate kbp 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 209 441 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MEEG2 Audio 94 2205 16 112 96 80 64 ayer 3 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R med
86. the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary
87. the belt to move freely with you under designed to go around the large bones of your body These s Rm i are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces normal conditions However in a collision the belt will of a collision the best lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your vehicle or being thrown out injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 cx Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Pulling Out Lap Shoulder Belt 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click A belt that is buck
88. the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch on again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped 40 The front fog light switch is on the headlight switch below the dimmer control To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights an
89. then apply the parking brake en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the parking brake push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal To release the parking brake push down on the parking brake pedal and then release Parking Brake The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equi
90. they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the v
91. through fifth gear The D Drive position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range AutoStick Gear selection The AutoStick feature can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the right or the left with the lever in the D Drive position The gear currently selected is indicated in the instrument cluster display Briefly press 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se the selector lever in the D direction and the transmis sion will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear directly to the next lowest gear for best acceleration NOTE To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved in D direction the transmis sion will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s revolu tions per minute RPM limit would be exceeded Briefly press the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the cu
92. tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi nate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
93. track will jump to the beginning of the current track 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RW Rewind Button Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back 5 seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward 5 seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first 2 seconds of the current track it will go back to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 24
94. updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials which may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition ke
95. vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original
96. will not cause interference with this system All of the Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number Keep the PIN in a secure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 location This number is required for dealer replacement of Fobs Duplication of Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Fob is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Fobs with you to the dealer Customer Key Fob Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid key and turn the ign
97. wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the
98. 00 cae 196 Shifting ees eee eva RR e Red 271 Automatic Transmission 271 275 280 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 47 Shoulder Belts sim 0 be eR seeds awed 42 Side Airbag scesero sisri e s 53 59 Side Curtain Window Airbag 53 Signals Turn sede EP D Ri 79 128 176 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 287 Snow Chains Tire Chains 320 SNOW TIES m 321 Sound Systems Radio 201 219 Spare lite csgt teseka aah eas dhe da ee ae 315 364 Spark Plugs uu iss re ced a a 396 438 Specifications Fuel Gasoline ceca seses lille 438 Oil ipee uu WEE a dt pedes RS UE Ea d 438 Speed Control Cruise Control 136 Speedometer sper ded ace cia Y P eR ess 174 SALINE acea caue mS WU tre e e ces 26 267 Automatic Transmission 4 268 Cold Weather sls dre Rr REIR 269 Emergency Jump Starting 373 Engine Fails to Start llle 270 Remo l iR due eee Pepe eee ea 2 eS 26 Starting and Operating 0 267 starting Procedures oie shege hes 267 Steering Column Controls ssscercseresreres ebars 127 Column Lock siiis ek deris ais miera p deri kg o d 134 Linkage 4 94348 9a b A PU uper hd Adds 4 403 POWER 2 2paacesUe ud x RR ale GR RU dU d 295 402 Tilt Column ooon aaao aaa RR 134 HO 478 INDEX aa Wheel Tt sso eoe etu oou du IS 134 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls iu E adr GOK s
99. 000 122 ll To Open And Close The Hood 123 OU ace ese rons cewek oneview enews 124 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Headlight Switch 0 124 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 125 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 126 Headlight Time Delay 126 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 127 Lights On Reminder lus 127 Fog Lights If Equipped 127 Multi Function Lever ills 127 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 128 Interior Lights usb bur REX As 129 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 130 Intermittent Wiper System 131 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Mist Feature casa an eae EUR RO RUE Rea 131 To Vary The Speed Setting 138 Windshield Washers 04 4 132 To Accelerate For Passing 138 Headlights On With Wipers Available With WM Overhead Console 000000 Auto Headlights Only 0 0 132 Courtesy Reading Lights Adding Washer Fluid 133 Sunglasses Storage 0 eeeeeeeee B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 134 loce Door Opener I Ba
100. 1 Release Hood lille 123 Reminder Lights On sesane t dsan iaa aaia 127 Reminder Seat Belt nnana annann 49 Remote Control Starting Systemi ess restesse ten sajes eee 26 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 247 Remote Starting System llle 26 Replacement Bulbs unikini 429 Replacement Keys 0 00 00 cece ee eee 16 Replacement Parts 0 000 c eee 389 Replacement Tires 0 0000 e eee 318 Reporting Safety Defects 0040 453 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 179 188 Restraint Head 2 03 gna edle e ei wate eas 120 Restraints Child 0c eee eee 66 Restraints Occupant 6 0 6 0 eee eee 41 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 376 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 163 Rotation Tires se 22e dee RE ERE 321 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 78 Safety Defects Reporting 4 453 Safety Exhaust Gas 476 INDEX ae Safety Information Tire 4 302 Safety TIPS a atc eite Bre i ERR I ehe eoe 76 Satellite Radio LL 201 202 219 221 236 Satellite Radio Antenna llle 237 Schedule Maintenance ills 442 Seat Belt Maintenance 00000000 420 Seat Belt Reminder llle 49 Seat Belts llle 41 42 78 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 47 And Pregnant Women
101. 2 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 30 Amp Windshield Wiper 18 Pink 19 z 11 30 Amp Anti lock Brakes System 20 Pink ABS Valves if 21 equipped 22 12 40Amp Radiator Fan v v a Green 13 50 Amp Anti lock Brakes System Red ABS Pump Motor if equipped 14 60 Amp Radiator Fan Yellow 15 50 Amp Radiator Fan Red 16 17 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Fuses Rear Power Distribution Center CAUTION There is also a power distribution center located under a hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area e When installing the Power Distribution Center This center contains fuses and relays cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center and possibly result in an electrical system failure z E E E When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 81344fb9 Opening The Access Panel 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se 812da393 Rear Power Distributi
102. 5 SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first 5 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks RND Random Button RES Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod device TUNE SCROLL Knob In the List mode the TUNE SCROLL knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the TUNE SCROLL knob clockwise forward and counter clockwise backward scrolls through lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select and start playing the track By turning the TUNE SCROLL knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME During all List mo
103. 6 for more information 25 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system B called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs See page 387 for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED HEU oa 818ec394 Electronic Vehicle Information Center The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons de scribed in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following System Status Vehicle infor
104. 8 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 240 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 87 Electrical Power Outlets 00 5 150 Electronic Brake Control System Brake Assist System 00000005 298 Electronic Stability Program 299 Traction Control System iilius 296 Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 421 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 136 Electronic Stability Program ESP 299 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 175 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 185 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 376 Hazard Warning Flasher 360 Jacking eate E hex Ph eS ees 362 JUMP Starting usa sea ee ee e RR 373 Overheating 40 4952 2 teu an metama Eme 361 TOWING casa rei hare poa Sh ede de AE Bares 377 Emission Control System Maintenance 388 442 Engine 22 2x Rx SER epi 75 384 385 386 Air Cleaner 24 5 sae ak p RUNI E Aes 396 Block Heater 0 0 0 eee eee 271 Break In Recommendations 75 Checking Oil Level 0 391 392 Compartment 00000 384 385 386 Coolant Antifreeze 00 406 438 COO is ke eh o ex mee ea ERES 405 Exhaust Gas Caution 40 77 335 Hals to Starf acd wb SSE ea SEE 270 Flooded Starting 34x eere e aet 270 Fuel Requirements 0005 332 J mp Starting oe b ead ede ead
105. 87 WARNING Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside E Rearview Mirror Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your Power Remote Control Mirrors inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window po
106. A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating t
107. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status if equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until
108. AUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Anti Lock Brake Light If Equipped amp 3 This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer See page 293 for more information 24 Low Fuel Indicator Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank See page 33
109. BLOCKA 2 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 3 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum WARNING wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges TARG the vehicle and retention teeth 81334194 Center Cap Removal 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 4 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to 5 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counter clockwise one turn engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange while the wheel is still on the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 JACK SADDLE SUPPORT MUST BE POSITIONED DIRECTLY UNDER THE FLANGE OF THE SILL 812dab8b Jack Engagement Locations 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 6 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts wheel c
110. C position to operate the radio 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the musi
111. CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will r
112. CK or ACC position Otherwise the ESP ESP combined with the BAS indicator The yellow will immediately be engaged and it will apply the BAS ESP BAS malfunction indicator light and the rear wheel brakes yellow ESP TCS indicator light in the instru ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running 302 STARTING AND OPERATING The system will turn the ESP BAS malfunction indicator light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchro nized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD Hy M A59 AN SY Q MAXIMUM SIZE as a DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY AND STANDARDS 3 TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H es STARTING AND OPERATING 303 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have th
113. Cluster Electronic Sta mE Orange bility Program ESP if 36 20 Amp Hands Free Phone if equipped Powertrain Yellow equipped Video Moni Control Module PCM tor if equipped Radio Stop Light Switch 37 15 Amp Transmission 30 10 Amp Door Modules Power Blue Red Mirrors Steering Con 38 10 Amp Cargo Light Satellite trol Module SCM Red Receiver SDARS Video 31 if equipped Vehicle 32 Information Module if 33 equipped 39 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if 34 e Red equipped ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 40 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview Orange Mirror if equipped Heated Seats if equipped Switch Bank 41 10 Amp AC Heater Control Red Headlights Tire Pres sure Monitoring if equipped 42 30 Amp Front Blower Motor Pink 43 30 Amp Rear Window Defroster Pink 44 20 Amp Amplifier if equipped Blue Sunroof if equipped Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses circuit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho rized dealer The Cluster and the Driver Seat Switch if equipped are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 11 The Passenger Seat Switch if equipped is fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12 The Door Modules the Driver Power Window Switch and the Passenger Power Window Switch are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13 If you experience temporary
114. E Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Infrared Dual Zone Climate Control System auto matically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger To accomplish this the system gathers information from the controls on the climate control from a dual sun sensor located in the top of the instrument panel from an infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle The controls on the climate control provide the system with operator input The dual sun sensor monitors sun load coming through the windshield The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger Other sensors take account of vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature air flow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the Mode Control knob on the right to AUTO and place the Blower Control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more
115. ES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play suus 229 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 232 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 234 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 234 H Satellite Radio RSC If Equipped RER REQ REN Radios Only 236 System Activation ecse sisse n 236 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID 000000 236 Selecting Satellite Mode 237 Satellite Antena peas inae deans ang 237 Reception Quality 00 237 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 237 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone It EQUIPPED c Ee s 240 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped 240 ll Video Entertainment System If Equipped 240 lll Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped secos rare ies Connecting The iPod Device 243 Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons 243 Play Mod es bere hme ERR n e 243 List Or Browse Mode sss 245 ll Remote Sound System Controls 247 ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 248 lll Radi
116. EUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce WARNING dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and the throttle body air in
117. G AND OPERATING ME Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving
118. Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instruc tions Clock Setting Procedure Setting the Clock 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time
119. ING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is enginee
120. ING YOUR VEHICLE 391 MIN OIL MARK MAX OIL MARK 809744ab Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 quart 1 0L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION 8131ee6a Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best perf
121. If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seat back is fully latched e If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seat back is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be taken to your dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a
122. Inspection 2 6 6 eee eee 409 Points to Remember llle 409 Pressute Cap awak scat tak awaned aes hates 408 Radiator Cap 1 6 eee eee 408 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 406 436 438 Corrosion Protection lees 416 Cruise Control Speed Control 136 Cruiselight 22cso s b e e r 174 Cup Holder i sese in ete m bow ee 152 420 Customer Assistance les 450 Customer Programmable Features 196 Data Recorder Event llle 64 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 130 Daytime Running Lights 127 Dealer Service lees 390 Defroster Rear Window 262 Defroster Windshield 78 250 256 Delay Intermittent Wipers 131 260 Diagnostic System Onboard 387 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 201 219 Dimmer Switch Headlight 128 Dipsticks Oil Engine 2 2 sees bb ndesege nese 391 392 Disabled Vehicle Towing sess 377 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 409 Engine Oll ii bene ee RR ones a hes 395 Door Lock 2v i eT Ies p ee a dw 28 Door Locks Automatic sess 30 Door Opener Garage suy rer 24 140 Drive Belts llle 395 Driving On Slippery Surfaces iile 287 en INDEX 465 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Watet 24044456040 859 40 2004 LERRA eo ES 28
123. LE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 865 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly res
124. Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient tempera ture is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE CAUTION e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been establi
125. MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle in a well lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Exhaust Gas Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Wheneve
126. N multimedia system contains a radio CD DVD player USB port a 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 inch touch screen allows for easy menu selection A 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While the Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections easy store presets backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to
127. NG YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs
128. NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank filter replacement may be necessary See your authorized dealer for service ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misf
129. OOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM Hi 3 2005 Ot any M awp srake WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REARFOGLANP AND LIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE as m rria X9 mb 3l i ae TOW LJ HAUL VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING __ CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON C8 F er 2 i OR 60 pr tr3 Low LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UGONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE Low C ES d a mw bo i MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 8191e970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO Li 6 INTRODUCTION ME WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do no
130. OUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SATELLITE RADIO RSC IF EQUIPPED RER REQ REN RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the
131. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner Therefore no belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected periodically and replaced if re quired Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure Inspect belts for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of dam age which could result in belt failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components See your authorized dealer for service 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in your vehicle Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter vals
132. Operation Chart that follows for details es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Hi or Lo Auto Sct mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature ata timc knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or A C on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed to any air outside or A C on or off than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode delivery point knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort
133. Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display one or more Low P
134. S TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials which may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warn ing limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
135. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION exem ex m RE UCer NEP ce Ee eile oe e levies 0 Sei Oe eh E T ra E T CE E e 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 02 c cc ccccccccccvcccens 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece cece ccc mnt 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee eeeeeeeee ehh tnn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece cece cere cere cere cere eee eee htt e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 0 cc ccc cece cece cece eee e eee hh hh hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 ccc cc istsr a cece cece rece hh m hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2c cece ccc eere ehh hh ht 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeh hh hh hh 10 INDEX dep EHE INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction anaa auaa ee 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manuadl ss 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 H Warnings And Cautions 0 6 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of you
136. T TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 360 H If Your Engine Overheats issus 361 H Jacking And Tire Changing 362 Preparations For Jacking 363 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 364 Jacking And Changing a Tire 366 Compact Spare Tire 0 0 000 371 Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation lf Required seca RR RR 371 B Jump Starting Procedures 373 H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle leues E Towing A Disabled Vehicle Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The CrEOUTIQ ou ear ke Aas o EHE CRT as 378 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 0 0 0 0 0 000 379 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel below the center air outlets Hazard Flasher Switch To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing Switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer gency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehi
137. TAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 3 5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT S1c6ccOe 1 Fuses Front Power Distribution Center 6 Coolant Bottle 2 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Coolant Pressure Cap 9 Washer Fluid Bottle 5 Power Steering Fluid 10 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT 81c6cc25 1 Fuses Front Power Distribution Center 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Coolant Bottle 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Power Steering Fluid 10 Washer Fluid Bottle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs A
138. TION a ua 64404 64 bem ener eee ads 364 Jack Operation gt s cese me ree 366 Jacking Instructions llle 366 Jump Starting 6s6i4 em me ea ey eene 373 Key Programming 00000 17 Key Replacement m RR 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 15 HO 470 INDEX ME Key In Reminder 0 0 0 0 0 00 takega 15 Keyless Entry System 2200 00 44 ad eye ee 20 Keys sus Subir e arta alk pat kpa ath ware e Beas 12 Knee Bolster 0 0 0 0 0 cece ees 52 Lane Change and Turn Signals 128 Lap Shoulder Belts 00000 42 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren ies ces RR C aed 70 71 Latch Plate 4 4 ae Rive OE OM EE ee 43 L atch S 4a save E ae HA ena aon E WU Y v3 79 H Od 42 454bau eR de Oe oe ee ERROR 123 Lead Free Gasoline 0 cee ee eee 332 Leaks Fluid lle 79 Leol ireset eree EEG e A a EP e 317 Liftgate 1 ios aset ries qua doi a Ges ah aot 39 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 260 404 Eight B lbs ete 79 429 Ane EEEE ien oq Ud 79 124 AUD AS cares bean anan ee dO ERR 58 63 78 177 Ant Lock ie eus bee eta 183 294 Automatic Headlights llle 125 Brake Assist Warning lille 301 Brake Warning tegese rent 00000 e ue 180 292 Bulb Replacement 429 430 Courtesy Reading 00 128 140 Cruise 3 Ds pane slang ton Sade mw Pa Be leg ee 174 Daytime Running sssi disien 127 Dimmer Sw
139. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal while set in the day position toward windshield and vertical mirror adjustment gum Inside Day Night Mirror Ny NIGHT Ea 80975232 Adjusting Rearview Mirror 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 817892c4 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
140. The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those doc
141. The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and dis
142. To Disarm The System 0 0 19 Bl Illuminated Entry System 20 Bl Remote Keyless Entry ooon naunan aana 20 To Unlock The Doors esses 21 To Lock The Doors 000 0000 ee 23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Using Th Panic Alarm 50 50 3 ace nmm Rn Lo WONG esas eo eoe ERO RC OR Rn 39 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 W Occupant Restraints issue ea cae 4 41 Transmitter Battery Service 25 Lap Shoulder Belts 00 42 General Information 00 26 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 48 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 26 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 0 48 How To Use Remote Start 27 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System lA Door Locks oe ceo cee Varese ar ewe ee vare 28 RAI 2 dsdopiaqacad tse said ids Manual Door Locks 28 ARIONU DOCS Soe RGM pet aise B Bow Doodle 2irsb lerriesnzra oo 30 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 51 Child Protection Door Lock rd 33 Seat Belt Extender ode e Rn 51 Windows eee p o o i Ka ii Event Data Recorder EDR 200 5 64 Dc Sepa aaa ne aaa aaa ie 95 Child Restraint iss 66 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 H Engine Break In Recom
143. U ces 362 366 Compact Spare ux eere ree 315 en INDEX 479 Flat Changing eese ne ee keane oa eee 362 General Information 00 00005 311 High Speed xe usu steps Senat ban 314 Inflation Pressures llle 312 JACKING ccs oss cetera dents a E ross 363 366 Life of Tires 29 2 08 cent ee ERE R 317 Load Capacity exis hm dua 307 308 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 322 Quality Grading 0000000 456 Radial juae edu fice ae SS CHER AA 314 Replacement 122g uw eae es RP ES 318 Rotation sa L2 s dE E Eee ey ded 321 Safety soe 9d me bee wee se s IP dre 302 311 Self Sealing ique dng ede ee Re soe ag ee 320 SIZES srece keras we he PE a dinin a pp ace ES 304 SHOW TITES us oss deg eoa dew ah Gta AOR GS 321 Spare Tire gated 64K ed RU EN Eder os 364 SPINNING ico oe ae a ae he a aod ae 316 Trailer TOWiNG uuu ae isd Ch ee ed 352 Tread Wear Indicators 000005 317 To Open Hood ches Eee hs 123 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 349 Torque Converter Clutch 00 279 JOWIDE sopisi estes ebd deed aie dana da md 342 Behind a Motor Home 357 Disabled Vehicle llle 377 G lde viuzssied k uiian tita RR 347 Recreational 4 26 Gale ee oa LG C RES 357 Weighit sus Rm Rum Lem RUE ARR 347 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 357 Traction Control pon iire cR eR A 296 Traction Control Light scs estosse ag asiana 296 Traction Contr
144. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn By Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will d
145. W DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm e Level 1 12 including a separator 3 character extension mm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times i m 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with
146. a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro
147. a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position If you open the liftgate after disarming the system you must use one of the previously described arming se quences if you wish to rearm the system after closing the liftgate NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the system e When the system is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open the doors or liftgate The lig
148. ad to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See page 322 for more information C
149. ake sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for filter replacement instruc tions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS lt and turn on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle a set the Mode control to Recirculate lt with A C on and roll up the windows MS Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel 7 or Bi Level 4 p with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel __ and turn on A C If it s cloudy or vat dark set the Mode control to Bi Level lt 4 with A C on Adjust Temperature Q iln control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost S e CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise
150. al buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See UCon nect website for supported phones If your cellular ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature exp
151. alet key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the Fob slide the mechani cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other hand 81bb182d Valet Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running Ignition Key Removal Place the selector lever in P Park Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion Opening either f
152. always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a Door Lock Plunger number of reasons A child or others could be If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not the ignition A child could operate power win inside the vehicle before closing the door dows other controls or move the vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking the key in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open the key is in the ignition and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear
153. and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats e Bi Level ws Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow e Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the in strument panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passen gers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Recirculation Control The mode control knob also controls the c recirculation feature You can choose Bi Level Recirculation air outlets Panel Recir culation air outlets or a mix or both while in this mode Normally air enters from outside the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle rapidly The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on and turn off the air conditioning When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button will illuminate when compressor operation is selected 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
154. ans that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems ca
155. ant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine off and cold the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle
156. aped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counter clockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The es WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft lb 135 N m JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is 7 For vehicles equipped with center caps install the me Lom start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt center cap by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles fo
157. aps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat bel
158. ar a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold pre
159. are finished editing an entry in the phone book you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phone book entry in the current 3 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say language is deleted Phonebook Delete Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phone book e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Phonebook Erase All Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press t
160. assengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather Emergency Liftgate Latch Release Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers the front airbags for both the driver and front passenger the optional supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window and the optional supplemental front seat mounted side airbags If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interi
161. ate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use P Park position on an automatic trans mission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and
162. ator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming
163. automati against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu cause the seat heater to overheat ous operation At that time the number of illuminated 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Folding Rear Seat When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down Folding Rear Seats position should not be used as a play area by The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an children when the vehicle is in motion They could additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the be seriously injured in an accident Children illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These should be seated and using the proper restraint loops can be tucked away when not in use system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Relea
164. ay during this 3 second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction OD the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com COM pass readings and the outside temperature PASS Button Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Co
165. bags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled up in the rear seat 2 Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly refer to information on Child Restraint in this section should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats 4 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 5 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 6 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 7 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 8 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 9 If your vehicle has
166. bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head light assembly and then turn it clockwise 1 Low Beam Headlight Bulb 2 High Beam Headlight Bulb 818f37c9 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 818f37ce 3 Park Turn Light Bulb 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Tail Stop Turn Signal Light and Backup Light 5 Remove 1 wing nut from the back of the tail light 1 Open the liftgate assembly 6 Remove 2 push pin fasteners under the liftgate with a flat blade tool 2 Remove tail light access cover 81388c60 3 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 7 Pull Gil light assembly clean from wehidle ta access 4 Disconnect the electrical connector bulbs MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise to remove it from the tail light assem bly 818f37db 2 Turn Signal Light Bulb 818f37d3 1 Tail Stop Light Bulb 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 9 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement b
167. c type es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice
168. can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a e collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious pe
169. ce must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration SEATS Manual Seats If Equipped Manual Seat Adjusting Bar Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward Power Seat Switch 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner control i
170. ce the key is removed from the ignition the transmission selector lever is locked in the P Park position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children unat tended inside a vehicle Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selec tor lever is in D Drive or R Reverse position Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will 274 STARTING AND OPERATING M change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in D Drive position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift interlock system BTSI that holds the selector lever in the P Park position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the selector lever out of the P Park position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position and the brake pedal must be depressed Brake Interlock Override For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the int
171. child lock control and pull it upward Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING 2 Insert the tip of the valet key or alike into the child i lock control and pull it downward Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE e After engaging the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make 1 Open the rear door certain it is in the desired position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
172. ching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cup Holders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cup holder in the center console NOTE The cup holder cannot be removed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS Cavity Car Mini Description Fuses Front Power Distribution Center tridge Fuse A power distribution center is located in the engine Fuse compartment This center contains fuses and relays 1 E Bm Washer Motor 2 25 Amp Powertrain Control Neutral Module PCM 3 25 Amp Ignition Run Start Neutral 4 25 Amp Alternator EGR Sole Neutral noid 5 6 25 Amp Ignition Coils Injectors Neutral Short Runner Valve 7 SERES s a s 8 25 Amp Starter Front Power Distribution Center Neutral 42
173. chronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words User Clock are displayed The GPS time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is
174. cle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in N Neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to HI This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 362 WHAT
175. coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When
176. crease the brightness of the in strument panel lights and if so equipped the lighting in the door map pockets and cup holders Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS sx The multi function lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 818c9c32 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multi function lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for Low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for High speed wiper operation es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wi
177. d 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale
178. d ba 4 ale ee ee en 35 POW T 222m nsa S Ra UR PLEX aL EA 35 Windshield Defroster Ln 78 250 256 Windshield Washers l l 130 132 404 FRU zu cata ne ene teeta te wean e tas 404 Windshield Wiper Blades 403 Windshield Wipers 000000000 ee 130 Wiper Blade Replacement 403 Wiper Delay 52 dra a iaaa Rr es 131 260 Wiper Reat ccana 025446944 2 PORE ps 260 403 Wipers Intermittent 131 260
179. d press the fog light switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multi Function Lever The multi function lever controls the operation of the turn E signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 818c9c32 Multi Function Lever 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can also signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes If either indicator has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved see your authorized dealer for service NOTE A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi Function Lever away from you to switch the headlight
180. d turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM Ampli tude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations t
181. de Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency En9lish Phonebook edia A e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Setup Phonebook Flowchart Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 111 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Y at a time Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Prompts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Setup Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit pin code Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System Lists o
182. des the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the TUNE SCROLL knob backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod device e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the TUNE SCROLL knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o clock positions 818ec394 Electro
183. ding downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are Overhead Console winding icy snow covered or slippery 8125e191 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the liftgate is opened or when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push the raised bar to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security
184. e The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are three 12 volt electrical outlets on this vehicle All of the outlets are protected by fuses The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package has power available only when the ignition is on This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result NOTE If desired the power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position Front Power Outlet ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 The center console outlet is powered directly from the The auxiliary outlet is also powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the bat
185. e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Vehicles with the 5 7L Multi Displacement System MDS may be equipped with the FUEL SAVER MODE in the Trip Functions of the EVIC The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS allows the engine to operate on four cylinders which will vary depending on driving habits and vehicle usage MPG AWwer aoe r w ala 0 5 a MEL aca ow o BP 81979318 4 Cylinder Operation MDS On FUEL SALER MODE NEM 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se This feature allows you to monitor when the MDS switches off the fuel on four of the eight cylinders and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase the time in which the fuel saver mode is active x MESA EH ios sn Senes i 1142 mi 8 Cylinder Operation MDS Off 819793f4 e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be rese
186. e Information Center EVIC if equipped 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 000000000 To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows both the brake and accelera
187. e not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 34 65 LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system e bn cushior meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages located behind each rear seat back Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower str
188. e outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button a second time to ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected NOTE To control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An LED in the button illuminates when the recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil ity For this reason the system will not allow Recircula tion to be selected while in defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protec
189. e tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in ee STARTING
190. eat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing back in Tighten webbing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat Tether Strap Mounting 2 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening betw
191. ed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Selector lever position e Accelerator position It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If e Vehicle speed your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on NOTE the brake pedal e After
192. een the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
193. ees ser Eimer Eee dies 438 Tank Capacity amp x2s4i4e e 9 bx ere es 436 Fuel System Caution 0 000000 337 Fueling sci scart rae eem esr RE edm PE 336 FUSES 4 sha ace Geni Eos e dea Baars dead d oa aed 421 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 140 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 468 INDEX ae Gasoline Clean Air llle 333 Gasoline Fuel 4 5 Se 332 CONSERVING sacos hn S RE ex eR Ras 188 Gasoline Reformulated 333 Gauges Coolant Temperature sones mi y lille 175 Fuel 2342324 Mini acd G Racer SACRE d 174 Odometer sees 179 Speedometer scs ea CT esl 174 Tachometer i sewaceiaw ees Ba Swed Peaks 174 Gear Ranges 6 eee 275 281 General Information 18 26 116 331 General Maintenance 00 0000 ee 390 Glass Cleaning i x ccc Ses eS eee a xa 419 Gross Axle Weight Rating 340 343 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 339 342 GVWR 2322923304558 bane dae Bb ae STO 339 Hands Free Phone UConnect 89 219 221 Hard Drive HDD 201 219 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 0 0 eee eee 288 Hazard Warning Flasher 66 360 Head Restraints esio eiewaan a EE NA 120 Headlights Automate essen sba rpa 4 ade RR X x 125 Bulb Replacement 00 2000 430 Cleaning gus came o Ch Rees 419 Delay 24 00004 e R eek ae e 126 High Beam Low Beam Select Sw
194. ehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK WARNING e Improper installation
195. einsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will m begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Pr
196. el of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Trip Odometer Button Base Cluster The word TRIP will appear when this button is pressed Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles kilometers A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset it 3 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light If Equipped O 5 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute r p m x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON See page 136 for more information 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices i e radio or slightly increase engi
197. elay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Rem
198. en exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nate
199. en tire wear such as feathering and one sided mH Wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME SELF SEALING TIRES IF EQUIPPED A non hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0 19 in 5 mm to minimize the loss of air pressure This contributes to the safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer In addition only install tire chains on P215 65 R17 and P225 60 R18 size tires The P245 45 R20 size tires do not provide adequate clearance for tire chains NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the follow ing precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serio
200. en you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you he
201. ents including those result fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ing from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped ve hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan gerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS 5 7L Engine Only This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect The Traction Control System TCS is standard on ve hicles equipped with Electronic Stability Program ESP The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability The ESP TCS indicator light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The indicator light also flashes when the TCS is active If the indicator light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little t
202. equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the origi
203. erifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This me
204. erlock system In order to override this system the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or ON position Remove the rubber storage tray from the bin located to the right of the selector lever The override can be activated by pressing the pink colored ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 tab which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin While the override is pressed the shifter can be moved out of the P Park position without pressing the brake After operation return the rubber storage tray to its original position 4 Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the selector lever between these gears Selector Lever Gear Ranges P Park P Park supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha n
205. es select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Se TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if de sired Also correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E Ed lt EE MM E
206. es with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode amp Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start Mode Press and release the remote start button one time NOTE To avoid inadvertent shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the remote start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle
207. es similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need i
208. ess of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this featur
209. ess the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 nn e Level 2 31 including
210. exces sive shifting and heat build up L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 NOTE Caren e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considered a normal condition Pulling the selector lever into the 3 position will show that the transmis Torque Converter Clutch sion is able to shift into and out of Overdrive A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These practices can cause overheating and damage to the transmission e If the vehicle has n
211. f when positioning or placing luggage above it to prevent damage to the sliding pop up roof panel es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Controls 171 Bl Base Instrument Cluster 00 172 ll Premium Instrument Cluster If Equipped 173 Bi Instrument Cluster Descriptions 174 lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped ssa rmm 185 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays a e ma ees 187 Oil Change Required 0 0 188
212. from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Gas Cap Tether Hook 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tight ened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occu
213. function in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your cont
214. g from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the selector lever between these gears en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha m nism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels Selector Lever toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the Gear Ranges curb on an uphill grade P Park P Park supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Never use P Park position on an automatic trans mission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the selector lever into the P Park position e When shifting into P Park
215. garding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see you authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are su
216. gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac turer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more impor tant to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califo
217. has sounded to indicate the 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 20 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system if equipped The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a failure Failure of either half of
218. hat carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC the radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The RE
219. hat an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer under Instrument Cluster Descriptions in Section 3 of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or
220. he Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired After confirmation the phone book entries will be entry and say Delete deleted e Press the Phone button to begin e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phone book entries e To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress Wh
221. he Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Un
222. he engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reac tivated by repeating this procedure NOTE When the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt Use The Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Seat belts that have the Automatic Locking Mode feature have a distinctive label on the webbing
223. he vehicle 2 Move the selector lever to the P Park position 3 Turn off the engine 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the selector lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three times Follow the reset procedure described under Tem porary Transmission Limp Home Mode in this section 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se In Permanent Limp Home Mode P Park R Re verse and N Neutral will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the D Drive shifter position The malfunction indicator light may illuminate AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance
224. higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller
225. hows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information NOTE U S federal regulations require upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify the mileage the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed because of repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus ter this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist See page 185 for more information Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See page 387 for more information Change Oil Message Base Cluster Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime
226. hrottle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions When the TCS is switched off the torque reduction feature is cancelled However a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and STARTING AND OPERATING 297 allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This wheel slip control is active up to 50 mph 80 km h CAUTION When the ESP TCS indicator light is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off Avoid spin ning one drive wheel This may cause serious dam age to the drive train NOTE e The Traction Control System comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur even if you used the ESP OFF button to turn OFF the system e The Traction Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this section for additional system information and operating instructions BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM BAS IF EQUIPPED WARNING The BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents
227. hts will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE e None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 35 feet 11 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter however the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all transmitter buttons for all Fobs E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 81c6853a Keyless Entry Transmitter To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within 5 seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter To change the cur rent se
228. ia e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device s
229. ie S Rp RR Ve pae es 247 Jc PPP 154 428 Storage Vehicle cs sees e re ns 258 428 Storing Your Vehicle 0 000000 asis 428 Stuck Freeing is cece ea ee Rn 376 Sun ROOF sce dv tro be sp REDE 147 Sunglasses Storage llle 140 Sunroof Maintenance iles 149 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 52 Sway Control Trailer llle 344 Synthetic Engine Oil 6 ee 394 System Navigation llle 219 System Remote Starting 000 26 Tachometer 2i6 c 24 3 eee pitis kie tti 174 Telescoping Steering Column 134 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 252 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 175 361 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 70 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 6 06 0 161 Tilt Steering Column q si sma sapr ia a h 134 Time Delay Headlight 040 126 Tip Stib ered ies e Ses da dewey a oes 14 Tire and Loading Information Placard 307 Tire Identification Number TIN 306 Tire Markings s e 302 Tire Safety Information 040 302 TIES se ra hea koe EG NA P Yo d Py ees 78 311 456 Aging Life of Tires gesis asike na Ra 317 Air Pressure 22222222 kg eee tes 311 Alignment insincere ele der ai Ren i alae d 319 Chains as 25k bg sic Pone eq RR dae es 320 Changing iex wisi ee ee aie eR S
230. igned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Temperature Grades The temperature grades are
231. ime of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C RND SINGLE DISC gt MP3 PUSHON PUSH AUDIO SELECT Q TUNE SCROLL 81c7c564 RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the
232. in the ON or ACC position DE Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows T WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model Power Window Switches passenger door power window switches have an auto 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to D
233. inder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration i
234. ing operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 NOTE The battery is stored under a hinged access WARNING cover in the load floor in the cargo area Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can jump starting burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented Battery Location 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked po
235. ion Grades lt esee eee he Re la Mopar Parts cies ser e ter es 453 Temperature Grades 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer
236. ips 259 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 400 401 Air Conditioning System 249 251 252 400 Air Pressure Tires 2 2 00000 ee eee 182 312 ur a ee 52 Airbag Deployment 0040 57 61 Airbag Light a aor o a 58 63 78 177 Airbag Maintenance crees Rr 63 Airbag Side o eencoses hp De VR epe ep 53 59 Airbag Window Side Curtain 53 59 Alarm Panic csser 0 0 ce en 24 Alarm Security Alarm 18 182 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alignment and Balance 0 319 All Wheel Drive AWD 287 415 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio nonna anaana aaan 237 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 406 407 436 Disposal 2 20 ht0 242 2G n de Gia bs 409 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 293 Anti Lock Warning Light 183 294 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Anti Theft System ied eb eh pioi Ren 182 Appearance Cate ess de x Race ERROR RR d 416 Arming Theft System Security Alarm en INDEX 461 Audio Systems Radio 201 219 Auto Down Power Windows 35 Auto Unlock Doors llle 31 Auto Up Power Windows esses 36 Automatic Dimming Mirror sss 86 Automatic Door Locks lll 30 31 Automatic Headlights liess 125 Automatic Oil Change Indicato
237. ire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine off and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunction
238. ism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use P Park position on an automatic trans mission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the selector lever into the P Park position e When shifting into P Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P Park position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 CAUTION CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the selector lever Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason is moved out of P Park before the ignition is with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans turned from the LOCK to ON position mission damage Tid ua For moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before WARNING moving the lever to R Reverse except when rocking Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the the vehicle ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe N Neutral practices that limit your response to changing traffic Engine may be started in this range or road conditions
239. isplay in the selected language ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect language selection Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 Km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
240. itation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions Cuts off fuel to the engine Flashes hazard lights Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlocks the doors automatically NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Maintaining Your Airbag System NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Modifications to any part of the airbag system Airbag Warning Light B could cause it to fail when you need it You
241. itch 128 Lights On Reminder 00 127 On With Wipers lees 126 132 PASSING eee doe EY ea dairem es 128 SWIECD 5s pre Ei dr EUR Un E ERE 124 Time Delay seceta Roe Res 126 Heated Mirrors 0 0 0 0 cee eee 88 Heated Seats 0 0 cee ee eee 120 en INDEX 469 Heater Heater Engine Block High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 128 Hitches Trailer Towing 0 0 0 c eee ee iss 346 Hold r Cori 125r RE ee ee 154 Holder Cupi sese miss pA ep ERE 152 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 140 Hood Release leen 123 Hoses eue Eee RR Eg 410 411 TENIHO cs acd eden ale e dee ERR 14 Key cz RET eee rer caw de dud 12 14 Ignition Key Removal lesse 14 Illuminated ENY ient ree me 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key 005 15 Indicator Traction Control Lun 296 Infant Restraint leen 66 67 Inflation Pressure Tires 0 0000 ee 182 Information Center Vehicle 05 185 Inside Rearview Mirror llle 85 Instrument Cluster 0005 172 173 174 Instrument Panel and Controls 171 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 420 Interior Appearance Care 00000 418 Interior Fuses ceseco ccricecri eee 421 Interior Lights siise see cee eeeaee ere nes 129 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 131 260 Introduction 0 e cae Aa Mig eave ere ea Wes 4 Jack LOCA
242. itch Headlight 127 128 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 2 eee 299 301 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 175 Engine Temperature Warning 177 ExterlO ses mates ex hace x TAD tow EE 79 FOS iun kde dera Vee ae aito e 127 178 Hazard Warning Flasher eccessi cedi assas 360 Headlight Switch js ie eR Ree 124 Headlights Ree er Zee meet emp 124 en INDEX 471 Headlights On Reminder 127 Seat Belt Reminder llle 178 Headlights On With Wipers 126 132 Service s zs xen ER So Ae d PI WE 429 430 High Bean isse e pere ho aie 128 178 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 184 High Beam Indicator iiie 178 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 182 322 High Beam Low Beam Select 128 Traction Control x sva cery agg Oar ee iA 301 Illuminated Entry 0 000000 00 20 Turn Signal o paura aeni EE 79 127 128 176 Instrument Cluster 04 124 174 Vanity Mirror 6 eee 88 Intensity Controle sa snesena paene eee 129 Voltage sespe deiae EE bea danas 175 Ini flOf uice 9 ne giim ineas 129 140 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 174 nc P ee ea a BN ore Lies 435 Load Leveling System 20 165 Lights On Reminder sss 127 Loading Vehicle 0 00005 339 341 Low Fuel s L2men eeSerjeeriex eene 184 Capacities eos Deme 2 odoinn de Y ER anes 341 Low Tire uim
243. ith your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disco
244. ition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security
245. ive HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio features allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While the Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections Traffic Messaging optional easy store pre sets parental lockout for VES if equipped backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is syn
246. l though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check v
247. l find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX KG T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard
248. lanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process
249. le only with leather upholstery provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Off or Low heat settings Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs will illuminate for high one for low and none for off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes mm WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care Front Heated Seat Switch when using the seat heater It may cause burns even Press the switch once to select high level heating Press at low temperatures especially if used for long the switch a second time to select low level heating Press periods the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements Do not place anything on the seat that insulates If high level heating is selected the system will
250. led into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward in creasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt Rt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
251. let opening in an attempt release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor to start the vehicle This could result in a flash will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this fire causing serious personal injury d occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic repeat the normal starting procedure transmission cannot be started this way Un CAUTION burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and dam To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again age the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting proce dures and follow them carefully a STARTING AND OPERATING 271 After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is rout
252. lled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator d
253. llowing trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR en STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Gross Trailer Weight GTW The Gross Trailer Weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident
254. llows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported b
255. lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressi
256. lowing another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required POWER STEERING The standard power
257. lso dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements es STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability brak ing performance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT gines Weight Distributing Hitch System 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 8181f96f Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your inte
258. lved in an accident A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irr
259. ly Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid Fob to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Fob to start the engine Either of these condi tions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Fobs or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the Fob being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics
260. m in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon 4 liters of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is Cooling System damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com WARNING plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis to seep into the passenger compartment In addition connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ture contro
261. mage to the roof rack and vehicle do 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite clamp on the other side of the crossbar 4 Pick up the crossbar and move it to the desired location Do not place the crossbar directly over the sunroof glass if equipped 5 Turn the lower clamp until the round side of the clamp completely faces the side rail 6 Turn the lever clockwise to tighten the lower clamp to the side rail When tight flip the lever downward 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 on the opposite clamp on the other side of the crossbar 8 Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is locked in position NOTE To reduce the amount of wind noise when the crossbars are not in use remove both crossbars from the side rails and place them inside the vehicle not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when Carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle Do not use the pop up feature of the sliding pop up roo
262. mation warning message displays Personal Settings customer programmable features mm Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped Navigation system screens if equipped Audio mode display 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button gt FUNC TION SELECT Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Personal Settings and Telephone if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system con trol For details refer to Remote Sound Sys tem Controls in this section A v SCROLL Button D AUDIO MODE Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control For details refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass reading and outside temperature this screen will display radio and media mode information depending on which
263. mendations 75 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The a Safty Tips idee 9 yea ds 76 M MM MM ELLE Transporting Passengers sss 76 Periodig Gately C Deos TOR should Make Outside The Vehicle llle Lock Your Vehicle seres 76 Exhaust Gas curas M PEE 77 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the igni tion switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Fob with Integrated Key The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the Fob The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead The v
264. momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in section 7 See page 391 for more information 15 High Beam Light E This light will turn on when the high beam headlights are ON Push the Multi Function lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam See page 127 for more information 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving See page 49 for more information 17 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light will turn on when the front fog lights are ON See page 127 for more information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 19 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer s
265. move the disc Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD R
266. move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P Park position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the selector lever is moved out of P Park before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position R Reverse Shift into R Reverse gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped N Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed Do not engage N Neutral position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The engine may be started in this range Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed es STARTING AND OPERATING 283 CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans mission damage WARNING Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident D Drive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts
267. mpact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI 414 KPa Cold Inflation Pressure e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only do not exceed 50 MPH 80 km h speed The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation If Required NOTE Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 1 Mount the road tire on the axle For vehicles equipped with wheel covers perform Steps 2 and 3 For vehicles equipped with center caps proceed to Step 4 VALVE NOTCH VALVE udi MOUNTING STUD COVER LUG NUT 80ea6062 2 Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone sh
268. mpass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located COMPASS VARIANCE MAP S000cbab UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit Telephone If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Telephone displays in the EVIC When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC pro vides the following telephone information 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent e Call status Incoming call connecting connected air time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed roaming and no phone connection UConnect Active Caller ID phone number display When the appropriate c
269. n To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and Mopar Carpet Cleaner for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or Mopar Satin Select Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use
270. n data during and or after airbag deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided
271. n diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 455 e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call Toll Free at Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations e 1 800 890 4038 U S these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer acc Aa controlled vehicle systems and features They show Or exactly how to find and correct problems the first time i using step by step troubleshooting and driveability VASTE ADONE PE Worl Wide Neo ae procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com pealtocis and a e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals e Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips 456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating ass
272. n result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 2 7L 3 5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 quart 1 0L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines MAINTAIN
273. n transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid Automatic Transmission other than that recommended by the manufacturer Fluid Level Check will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted ine Parts for the correct fluid type The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended transmission fluid and filter change intervals If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The o
274. nal equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 CAUTION WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious inju or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes wit load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control result in false speedometer and odometer readings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Unev
275. nded towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Max Tongue Wt Gross Trailer Wt 2 7L amp 3 5L Rear Wheel 22 SQ FT 2 04 square meters Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 100 Ibs 45 kg Drive RWD Automatic 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square meters Up to 3 persons amp Luggage 100 Ibs 45 kg 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square meters Up to 4 persons amp Luggage 100 Ibs 45 kg 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square meters Up to 5 persons amp NO Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg gage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Max Tongue Wt Gross Trailer Wt 3 5L All Wheel Drive 32 SQ FT 2 97 square meters
276. ne speed if at idle If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain SERVICE IMMEDI ATELY 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check y when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the gear selector in park and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 8 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in
277. nformation General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 332 STARTING AND OPERATING The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States llle KR55120123 Canada isa sae ee Poe ene Tg 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 7L Engine The 2 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD 3 5L and 5 7L Engines The 3 5L amp 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide sat isfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gaso line having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not pro
278. ng braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop the clicking sound of solenoid valves brake pedal pulsations and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS 294 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated elec tronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio trans mitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equip ment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effec tiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase raking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns fol
279. ng the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the panic alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 e You may need to be less than 35 feet 11 meters from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Fob Program ming See page 17 for more information If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlora
280. ngine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following
281. nic Stability Program cannot pre condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the maintain the desired path vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than dize the user s safety or the safety of others appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The indicator light also flashes when the TCS is active If the indicator light begins to flash during accelerati
282. nic Vehicle Information Center UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display This is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level VOL Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to UME decrease the sound level Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the D Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle MODE Button 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the mode will change i e from AM to FM to Media mode etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp p Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various radio media and FUNC Universal Customer Interface UCI functions TION i e advance presets select next folder jump to SELECT or start playing songs in playlists etc depend Button ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp A Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek v up and down radio stations
283. nly exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a Transfer Case and Front Differential The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole The transfer case fill plug is located on the rear housing near the output shaft The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Fluid Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended transfer case fluid change intervals Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and
284. nnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the in struction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list i
285. not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions 819b6e91 If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the ve hicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side curtain and seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions For vehicles so equipped the supplemental side curtain airbag and front seat mounted side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the air
286. o elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in mm Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES9 Guide 236 UNDERSTANDING Y
287. o Operation And Cellular Phones 249 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M H Climate Controls 3 05 oaaae OH RERO Oe 249 W Rear Window Features 260 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating Rear Wiper Operation 0 0 260 ON erp ia weer oda sie dades sess Hh ne Rear Washer Operation 260 Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped oo 00s cess sce eeeeeeees 252 Adding Washer Fluid 0 261 Electric Rear Window Defroster 262 Operating TIPS mes ceira kamaa alk beats 257 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 81817374 1 Air Outlet 6 Glove Box 11 Ash Tray 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Radio 12 Ignition Switch 3 Rear Wiper Washer Switch 8 Climate Control 13 Hood Release 4 Hazard Switch 9 Heated Seat Switch 14 Headlight Switch 5 Electronic Stability Program Off But 10 Power Outlet If Equipped ton Traction Control System Off Button 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 8190558e UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER IF EQUIPPED 81905592 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the lev
288. o so push the lever up and release RESUME ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelera tor pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the lever RESUME ACCEL When the lever is released a new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set push down and hold the lever SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Using Speed Control On Hills OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and an optional power sunroof switch NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal The automatic transmission will downshift while climb ing uphill or descen
289. o store similar sounding names in the UConnect phone book UConnect phone book nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows and 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e dry weather condition e operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth on mo
290. ol Switch 0 00085 296 Trailer Towing 44 cac redeem estoy eU s benei 342 Cooling System Tips 0000 356 EDteli S secs Fang Rue ee ed Olea d ota cas 346 Minimum Requirements 05 350 Trailer and Tongue Weight 349 HO 480 INDEX ae With cras oec sk Rc RO ade eee od d 353 Trailer Towing Guide 004 347 Trauer Weight sans oA ae erg hne thsi os 347 Transfer Case llle 415 Bl ld sec ears nerne Pace a ios 415 440 Maintenance iue yu sae Oe ae ee Ria x 416 Transmission 0 0 0 0 cee eee 414 Automatic 0 000000 271 275 280 414 Eluld 2i phe aia wai ge bcs gate wae 440 Range Indicator lille 275 281 Shif ng ce EXER ee da tga PESE 271 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry ever re RA ek REP rad P Web 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 140 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry ssepe deret e alanine ae dirae ans Ai eden 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets 2e 75 Tread Wear Indicators 00000 317 Trip Odometer 2s nae ees 174 179 T rn Signals 6c eed nore eme e ex 128 176 UCI Connector 4 2 4 pr 242 UConnect Hands Free Phone 89 219 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 456 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 242 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 201 219 Universal Transmitter
291. olant 102 000 170 000 60 en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the spark plugs on 2 7L and 3 5L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Replace the timing belt on 3 5L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter 120 000 200 000 120 Replace the accessory drive belt on 2 7L engines 120 000 200 000 120 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your E Reporting Safety Defects 05 453 Vehicle iau m RESP ex dS 450 CMA uo e e e canoes 454 Prepare For The Appointment 1 450 Bl Publication Order Forms isses 454 Prepare A istesede ee eere AES 450 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 450 Quality Grades se ee rete 456 H if You Need Assistance sellers 450 Treadwear see Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 453 Tract
292. ommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably
293. on ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP OFF button is located in the center of the instrument panel To turn OFF the ESP momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the system ON again momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the indicator light will turn OFF NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the ESP by pressing the ESP OFF button a STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Synchronizing ESP 1 CAUTION The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is When the ESP TCS Indicator Light is illuminated BAG combined with BAS indicator If the power continuously the ESP is switched off Avoid spin supply is interrupted battery disconnected or ning one drive wheel This may cause serious dam discharged the ESP BAS malfunction pd age to the drive train tor light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS malfunction CAUTION indicator light should go out Em ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator and ESP TCS If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the Indicator Lights engine must be shut off key in the ignition switch to The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is the OFF LO
294. on Center Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD Yellow Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 2 40 Amp Integrated Power Mod Green ule IPM 3 _ 4 40 Amp Integrated Power Mod Green ule IPM 5 30 Amp Heated Seats if Pink equipped 6 20 Amp Fuel Pump Yellow 7 8 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec Blue tor DLC Wireless Con trol Module WCM Wireless Ignition Node WIN ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 9 20Amp Power Outlet 18 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet Yellow Yellow 10 19 10 Amp Stop Lights 11 Red 12 20 20 Amp Rear Wiper Motor Yellow 13 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control a ES ES Red Cluster Security Mod 22 E ule if equipped 23 15 20Amp Trailer Tow Brake Mod 24 Yellow ule if equipped 25 Z 16 20 Amp Rear Power Outlet 26 Yellow 27 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con 17 E 20 Amp Cluster Red troller ORC Yellow 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 28 10 Amp Ignition Run 35 5 Amp Antenna Module if Red Orange equipped Power Mir 29 5 Amp
295. onditions exist and if supported by the cell phone the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the UConnect phone The W number of horizontal bars increases as the Signal strength of the UConnect phone signal in Strength creases v Incom ing Call n Analog IN Roam ing The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an incoming call The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently in analog mode The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently roaming UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail v a phone connection has been made Voice Call in Mail Progress The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that E text message the UConnect phone is currently not avail mm able Text Phone Message Not The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the bic EC battery strength of the UConnect phone ix Navigation If Equipped Battery Strength Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu 196
296. or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio we The individu
297. or of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the WARNING inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these Lap Shoulder Belts areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed ae y y J All seating positions In your vehicle are equipped with Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that Lap Shoulder Belts is not equipped with seats and seat belts z Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during seat belt properly m 2 very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are shoulder part of
298. ording to ambient light levels To turn the system ON rotate the headlight switch counter clockwise to the AUTO A position When the system is ON the Head light Time Delay feature is also ON This means the headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF move the headlight switch out of the AUTO A position Headlight Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for 90 seconds programmable when leaving your ve hicle in an unlighted area To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while
299. ormance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating 7 temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System under Starting and Operating for more details Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3 5L Engines for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the rec
300. ot been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a normal condition and it will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within 5 seconds of shifting from P Park into any other gear position 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into second gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected P Park R Reverse and N Neu tral will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into P Park e Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine e Shift into D Drive and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Shiftin
301. our authorized dealer as soon as possible See page 63 for more information 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will EZ sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is critically hot The vehicle should be turned off imme diately and serviced as soon as possible See page 361 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESP See page 296 for more information See page 299 for more information 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The yellow ESP BAS malfunction indicator light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running The system will turn this light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both See page 299 for more informa tion 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light S271 This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on
302. ove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lock button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee and release the window lock button again setting it in Reset Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the auto up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of press
303. over If Equipped The removable rollaway tonneau cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats Load Floor Fully Folded The tonneau cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended tonneau cover in place ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 8138960 The tonneau cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the tonneau cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area To install the tonneau cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the tonneau cover housing into the left or the right front attachment point shown Front Attachment Points Then insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the tonneau cover housing into the remaining front attachment point 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Next grab the tonneau cover handle and pull the cover Waterproof Liner toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening The optional waterproof liner can be placed over the guide the rear attachment posts on both ends of the lower load floor cover into the notches in the trim panels Then lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle FRONT
304. over if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 8 Mount the spare tire NOTE For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare However when reinstalling the road tire follow the procedure under Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installa tion in place of the remaining steps in this procedure 9 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 10 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counter clockwise 11 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft lb 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station 12 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 WARNING WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spare Tire The co
305. peket tesia eR dere 182 om ER 307 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 184 LOCKS raa sentitan oe AS ace do RR ne SR 28 Map Reading i 23x emm Res 128 140 Auto Unlock i4ucseenreaeoes em cbe RES 31 Oil Pressure scena siat dat arque PER a 178 Automatic DOOF edea cisne tecta e Wale acta ed 30 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 130 Child Protection sese slo e mm 33 PASSING A s 128 oo 28 Reading ce adie dawnt tea dcos quae Ed 128 140 Power Door lt based MEME 30 HO 472 INDEX aa Low Tire Pressure System 322 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren EATCED ni scies ed rar ae drerit 70 71 Lubrication Body 6 eee 403 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 163 Lumbar Support 0 0000000 119 Maintenance Free Battery 04 398 Maintenance General llle 390 Maintenance Procedures 0 000005 390 Maintenance Schedule llus 442 Maintenance Sunroof 0 00 00 149 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 184 388 Manual Service ce es 454 Map Reading Lights 128 140 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 413 Methanol 3 inei need SG 4 abe se 333 Mini Trip Computer llllllllesn 188 Mirrors i zog ge RUP paces eo oe Ea ed 85 Automatic Dimming llle 86 Electric Powered llle 87 Electric Remote 0 cee ee eee 87 Exterior Folding llle
306. perating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for
307. pers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than OFF Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multi function lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Mist Feature Push the multi function lever inward toward the steer ing column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multi function lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles af
308. pes Program Type 16 Eo cni No program type or un Pen Wong Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Program Type 16 cnc Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes es UNDERSTANDI
309. pped 22 382 140 Bl Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 135 Pusranmine Hotel ic nes cocta 141 Bi Electronic Speed Control sese 136 Date drad Canadian opments icut 144 Electronic Speed Control Operation 136 Diis Poin lt 2422 046sc0cecee00e 145 TO ACHVate vis ee ERES RR ea 137 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button 145 To Set At A Desired Speed suus 137 e REPRE 145 To Deactivate o cereri bebes REA 137 Troubleshooting Tips oo oooi 0 scene 145 ae a ADU RUE qudd e General Information 0 146 H Power Sunroof If Equipped 147 Opening Sunroof Express 148 Closing Sunroof Express 148 Pinch Protect Feature llle 148 Pinch Protect Override issus 148 Venting Sunroof Express 148 Sunshade Operation 00 149 Wind Buffeting sess graas peed a ek ola npe 149 Sunroof Maintenance 0 006 149 Ignition Off Operation 149 Sunroof Fully Closed seassa mesia i aaea 150 ll Electrical Power Outlets Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off Cup Holders Cargo Management System If Equipped ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped E Load Leveling System If Equipped 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
310. pped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated duri
311. pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale en STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this i
312. r 179 188 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 252 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives o ressesie riade i 415 Automatic Transmission 275 280 414 415 Adding Fluid occ f Rs 415 440 Autostick llle 283 286 Fluid and Filter Changes 415 Fluid Change uerum Rope asia 415 Fluid Level Check 0000000 414 Fid Type seen ee deduce 440 Gear Ranges sace aeo eee as 275 281 Overdrive uacua Aces ERROR EROR UR RC rs 277 shifting qire eee eb er REESE 275 280 Special Additives ss esser ep m 415 Torque Converter 2 6 e banade ipe eee 279 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode i are bue SEEN eto Y NR ERR 280 284 285 Autostick isch RE XS 283 286 Axle Fluid oeus esc ee ed pa Ix RR 440 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 440 Ball Joints 23x chor 4h ex os eR Sa OS 402 Battery 2idicuudeesbec gu pem tere een koe 398 Emergency starting sisse sc re ees 373 JUMP Startins ahh wR E ES RERO 373 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 LG CANON och Sid Suk RS ee ee eS 374 398 Bearings i424 699 ee Ravages Po e 416 Belts Drive x sys desc d Sa ae AU ICE A e d 395 Belts Seat e nce ec ase EM DE 42 78 HO 462 INDEX ae Body Mechanism Lubrication 403 B Pillar Location 2 307 Brake Assist System 298 Brake Control System Electronic 298 Brake Fluid seus RR RR SS 440 Brake Parking ss asa 4 gia er yeh n 290 Brake System s zs
313. r NOTE The light will turn on when the ignition switch in the ON position and the parking brake is applied This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application See page 292 for more information 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 21 Vehicle Security Alarm VSA Indicator Light If Equipped The VSA indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is arming and slowly when the VSA is armed See page 18 for more information 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Equipped inflated to the inflation pressure recommended has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can le
314. r Blades Windshield Washers Rear Window Washer Exhaust System Cooling System Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Fuel System Brake System Automatic Transmission All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders ll Fuses Power Distribution Centers Fuses Front Power Distribution Center Fuses Rear Power Distribution Center li Vehicle Storage ll Replacement Light Bulbs ll Bulb Replacement Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight And Park Turn Light ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Tail Stop Turn Signal Light And Backup Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 438 Light esci dte een a eee artsts 432 PAGING lt cwias sw aed r rhet quens pas Vd del 438 License Light iis ansasudexecerep taat bois 435 ur RNC 440 H Fluids And Capacities llle 436 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT C Q 4 Go 5 s Q S1c6cbbe 1 Fuses Front Power Distribution Center 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Coolant Bottle 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Power Steering Fluid 10 Washer Fluid Bottle ee MAIN
315. r a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question re
316. r seat belt and if e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a belts number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se the gear elev mit be The gear selector must be in the N Neutral or P CAU TIONI Park position before you can start the engine Apply the edi de Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow brakes before shifting into any driving gear ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or N
317. r vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual INTRODUCTION 5 a RO y sD e 2 wd a BRS ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATERINFUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULA HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE g 3 d 9 l af O 1 cz T BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTERLIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERANDLOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE S CIO y scan Z lt AWD I H Cv T FUELFILLSIDE REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOMELIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT H
318. radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 selected Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes mm e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or AC
319. rain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 of this manual If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct coolant type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Adding Coolant no Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant e Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
320. rce to install the center cap equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If 8 Stow the jack tools and spare tire Make sure the base the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explo sive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME
321. re 362 Chart lire Sizing cssc cesh e RE 304 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light s s Ea lY 4 YEerdebre T pe 388 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 76 Checks Safety sese 76 Child Restraint ss 66 67 68 71 73 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 70 71 Child Safety Locks s ninis llle 33 Clean Air Gasoline 0 0 0 0 0 es 333 Cleaning Wheels ati pred fea ee eee E re ace 418 Windshield Wiper Blades 403 Climate Control 0 0 0 es 249 Clock acta hth eae asp eee EN 202 206 221 225 Coin Holder 234332 ce ue Rire ee BE 154 Cold Weather Operation 06 269 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 248 Compact Sp te Tie cask a ae erae 315 Suunto Em 191 Compass Calibration lees 192 Compass Variance llle 192 Computer Trip Travel 0000 188 Connector BCPto cows ccs usati tute 242 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 242 Conserving Fuel uses euer ee ena 188 Console Floor llle 154 Console Overhead 2 222 ol 139 Contract Service cen 452 Converter Catalytic iieri rea 397 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 408 Cooling System 4 perdus pare predit eR da 405 Adding Coolant Antifreeze Coolant Capacity 464 INDEX ME Coolant Level 0 0 0 0000 cee ee 406 409 Disposal of Used Coolant 409 Drain Flush and Refill 406
322. rear window defroster is ON The de froster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes of operation for the first push of the button and will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second push of the button STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures siiis 267 Automatic Transmission General Automatic Transmission 268 ENIGIQNIROI pean aA eR pes Normal Starting Tip Start 269 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 4 Speed Automatic Transmission UICE 269 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 280 If Engine Fails To Start 270 W AutoStick If Equipped 00008 286 After Starting sss sprak eede aaea 271 AutoStick Operation 000 286 Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 271 WM All Wheel Drive If Equipped 287 Bl Automatic Transmission sss 271 W Driving On Slippery Surfaces 287 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Acceleration aie sed Seen Bede ae ee 287 Wl Electronic Stability Program ESP JT TC 288 IPEQUDDES ee rdi diesen di Bl Driving Through Water 288 SY MEIMOUIZINE HSE idus Sit ate ne di aui 20 Flowing Rising Water
323. red to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
324. region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to re
325. responding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the Phone button and say Phonebook Download Sys tem prompts Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue tooth
326. ressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for 3 seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing pee yg Pew ae Bron amp oad Low Tire FSI zr 2245 mi 819793fc ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received gem fans Sis 81979401 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SY
327. result 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardl
328. rk Plugs 3 5L ZER5LP 13G Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L REC14MCC4 Gap 043 in 1 1 mm Oil Filter 2 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Oil Filter 3 5 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Oil Filter 5 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Fuel Selection 2 7 Liter 87 Octane Fuel Selection 3 5 Liter 87 to 89 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7 Liter 87 to 89 Octane 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Front Axle API GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Axle API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Transfer Case Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant LX P N 05170055AA or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emission Control System Maintenance 442 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 0 442 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M
329. rnia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions belo
330. rol of the vehicle The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side cur tain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated The Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the front seat mounted side airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front seat mounted side airbag The inflat
331. ront door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Fob with Integrated Key and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unau thorized vehicle operation Therefore on
332. rrent gear directly to gear D WARNING On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehi cle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Second gear will operate in the D Drive shifter position The Malfunction Indicator Light may be illuminated A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop t
333. rs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 of this manual for more information VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 340 STARTIN
334. rsonal injury 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints ar
335. s being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Phone button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two procedures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system
336. s located on the outboard side of the Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is Sea dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Power Seat Recline Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired Lumbar Support Control Lever amount of lumbar support 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjust the restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise it pull upward on the head restraint To lower it depress the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint 81b7959a Adjustable Head Restraint Heated Seats If Equipped Heated seats which are availab
337. s to HIGH beam Pull the Lever towards you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 8125e174 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will in
338. se Lever Next move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 81371845 Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M inches 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Headlight Switch x The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights T Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn it to the second detent for headlight park light and instrument panel light operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights ON or OFF acc
339. selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold Automatic Transmission General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Trans mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds e Altitude after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK ition first e Vehicle Loading Ines e Driving Style The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always The selector lever is automatically locked while in the Shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from P Park position To move the selector lever out of the P Park position the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release the ignition and apply the parking brake On
340. shed for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped
341. si tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmen
342. side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format ty
343. sition Defrost Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights Power Mirror Adjust Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Illuminated Vanity Mirror HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grated Hands Free Communication UConnect sys tem Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for this radio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See UConnect website for sup ported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following web sites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e
344. spected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS la VurtorS occ cs oes is ive Ae Y Roe e en a 85 Heated Remote Control Mirrors Inside Day Night Mirror 85 a 99 Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 88 If Equipped gt is coss eee 86 WiHands Free Communication UConnect Outside Mirrors leen 86 DE UPPE mb aa et terete her ee ras x Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Operation 2 55 a pug piriona Y PHI ES 91 It Equipped Lees er mer emere 87 Phone Call Features 000050 98 Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer UConnect System Features 101 ee 87 Advanced Phone Connectivity 106 Power Remote Control Mirrors 87 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System 0 000000 107 General Information 116 la Sedle 5 ctnof s soe EET RE EEEE ER a 116 Manual Seats If Equipped 116 Power Seats If Equipped 117 Power Reclining Seats If Equipped 118 Lumbar Support If Equipped 119 Head Restraints less 120 Heated Seats If Equipped 120 Folding Rear Seat 0 0 0000
345. spray is desired maximum spray of 10 seconds The rear wiper operates for 2 wipe cycles after the switch is released Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon 4 liters of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME WARNING CAUTION Commercially available windshield washer solvents To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Electric Rear Window Defroster The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illumi nate when the
346. ss and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Call Continuation UConnect System Features Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is on the vehicle can be any one of three types USING BE e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue M s x eae on the UConnect system either until the call ends or e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the name of the language you wish to switch to the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the English Espanol or Francais if so equipped SR KEIBEROPUS UON e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue language selection on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone After selecting one of the languages
347. sters etc TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER while being towed the key must be in the ON position VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY not the ACC position Make certain the transmission The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this remains in N Neutral vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E 2 7L Engine Compartment 384 W Maintenance Procedures 0 390 W3 5L Engine Compartment 385 Engine Oll ereraa ires qr a aoa pas dn er ne 391 B 5 7L Engine Compartment 386 Engine Oil Filter ess rasso ctr predse cniris 395 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 387 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 395 Loose Fuel Filler Cap o on naain 387 Spark Plugs o n aoaoina 396 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Engine Air Cleaner Filter 396 M M Ear e ina Meee pease 958 Fuel Filter E 396 B Replacement Parts sacer er me 389 Cstalylie a E oie Paesi eet stes 397 W Dealer Service 0 es 390 Maistenanssi Bree BMS oc eere osu aie 308 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Air Conditioner Maintenance A C Air Filter If Equipped Power Steering Fluid Check Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints Steering Linkage Body Lubrication Wipe
348. supplemental side curtain airbags and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 10 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section in this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side curtain airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win dows if equipped Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags if eq
349. system an electronic brake controller is not required Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes Ibs 907 kg when you need them and could have an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety 354 STARTING AND OPERATING The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN me
350. t read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information VIN LOCATION Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN vehicle registration and the title en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ua Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its road worthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS A Word About Your Keys 0 12 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 FOB With Integrated Key 0 0 13 Tip Start Feature scheme em s 14 Ignition Key Removal 06 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 15 lg Sentry Rey 6 ees cade se ke b 15 Replacement Keys 0 0000000 16 Customer Key FOB Programming 17 General Information 0 0005 18 ll Security Alarm System If Equipped 18 Rearming Of The System 18 To Arm The System 2 es cere eye 19
351. t required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M AIRBAG Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers KNEE BOLSTERS 8191fe48 Front Airbag Components NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain WARNING airbags they are located above the side windows Their e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG m covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could
352. t through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will displ
353. tal Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING
354. tarting connections or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster Jump Starting battery Let the engine idle a few minutes Then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE For vehicles equipped with ESP refer to Syn chronizing ESP under Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 of this manual if the ESP BAS light in the instrument cluster remains on continuously after start ing the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a
355. te Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door BATTERY ACCESS DOOR 81bb1827 Battery Replacement 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio
356. tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard
357. ter releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned OFF the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn OFF Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Washer Fluid Reservoir The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon 4 liters of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicl
358. termining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 314 START
359. tery and or prevent this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting engine starting 81371751 Center Console Power Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE gS Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CUP HOLDERS Front Seat Cup Holders CAUTION The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the center console e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from Front Seat Cup Holders the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Rear Seat Cup Holders The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats
360. tery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Connecting the iPod Device Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below Controlling the iPod using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In this Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data TUNE SCROLL Knob Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to go to the next or previous track The TUNE SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod mobile digital device Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first 2 seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the
361. the center console armrest upper storage bin 81abfb61 VES Remote Control Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to your Vehicle Entertainment System VES User Manual for detailed operating instruc tions UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ radios only with UConnect For sales code REN touch screen radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug in an iPod mobile digital device into the vehicle s sound system through a connec tor UCI connector using an optional connection cable available through Mopar See your authorized dealer for details Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 e the iPod bat
362. the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in the event of an EBD failure Immediate repair of the ABS system is required in the event of an EBD failure The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should turn on for approxi mately two seconds and then turn off The light will remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake fault is detected If the parking brake is not applied and the light remains on or if the light does not turn on have the light inspected by an authorized deale
363. tilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure Fuel System
364. tion and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months m
365. to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in N Neutral or P Park 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the valet key or alike into the
366. to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora e tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a e DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Iime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
367. tor pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is ON CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Operation The speed control lever located on the right side of the steering wheel operated the system 81bec905 1 CANCEL 2 RESUME ACCEL 3 ON OFF 4 SET DECEL cated on the end of the speed control lever The tem is ON To turn the system OFF push and release the To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button lo indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to
368. transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start Gear selector lever in P Park Doors closed Hood closed Liftgate closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE Panic button not pressed To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the Remote Start button on x2 the RKE transmitter twice within 5 seconds The parking lights will flash and horn will honk twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if so equipped is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycl
369. ts 578 Visor Vanity Lights 040 A6220 Glove Box Light ke vere babes ales 194 Door Courtesy ie cese Res he eR RR hee 562 Shift Indicator Light sescca siis cerca JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cup Holder Lighting LED Serviced at Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for replace ment instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlight 000 9006 High Beam Headlight seres ece peniser ses 9005 Front Park Turn Light 3457AK Front Fog Light If Equipped 9145 H10 Serviced at Dealer Front Side Marker 194NA Serviced at Dealer Tail Stop sese e RR IRE REG 3157KP27 7WK Tor Light ers 6 635408 oes eae 3757 AP27 WK Rear Side Marker 3757 APY27 W Back p Light em ecc ke tases 921 W16W Center High Mount Stop Light CHMSE sacs cen Rae Ru ee RE RR ace ape bears LED Serviced at Dealer License idu mar mue WaecrteEXRG v3 W5W 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight and Park Turn Light 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem bly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate
370. ts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a distinctive label on the seat belt webbing The seat belt must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Auto matic Locking Mode in this section for details A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child s
371. tting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with t
372. ual tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches deep will
373. uch as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This prod
374. uct incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The RER multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satellite Radio player Navigation system CD DVD player USB port 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and the UConnect hands free Bluetooth cellular system NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect the unit will respond with a Feature Not Available message when selecting controls related to this feature A 6 5 inch touch screen allows easy menu selection while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertainment and hands free mobile phone use The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identifica tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared Hard Dr
375. uipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring e Seat Belt Reminder Light e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will not detect roll over For vehicles so equipped The ORC also determines if a side impact is severe enough to deploy the supple mental side curtain airbag and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbag as required for each type of impact 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and they will not inflate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 N seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal
376. ulb 10 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly and then turn it clockwise 11 Reinstall the tail light assembly fasteners and elec trical connector 12 Close the liftgate 818137e2 3 Backup Light Bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 License Light 1 Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Light Bulb 2 Socket 7 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the light to the rear fascia and then install the screws 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel approximate 2 7 Liter Engine 18 gallons 68 liters 3 5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive 18 gallons 68 liters 3 5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive 19 gallons 72 liters 5 7 Liter Engine 19 gallons 72 liters Engine Oil With Filter 2 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 0 qts 5 7 liters 3 5 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified 6 0 qts 5 7 liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 0 qts 6 6 liters es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Cooling System 2 7 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 9 9 qts 9 4 liters mula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 11 1 qts 10 5 liters
377. ulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when de
378. uments We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receiv
379. ure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed To open the liftgate depress the liftgate release switch located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 81346adc Liftgate Release Switch The liftgate will not open manually if the gear selector is moved out of the P Park position or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE If a power malfunction occurs you can use the WARNING emergency liftgate latch release to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release is located behind a gt e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison snap in cover on the liftgate trim panel ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your p
380. us damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on Rear Wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tir
381. usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch clear water metal and painted surfaces e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug Special Care and Tar Remover to remove e If you drive
382. verride ier alee phone List Ph es to be deleted Is ongs P i System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial Six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This devi
383. vide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded
384. volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scrat
385. w to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon mH monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 8137f5f8 Fuel Filler Door NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result
386. which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 349 es HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the CAUTIONS O trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional CAUTION factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this mended manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings ee STARTING AND
387. x LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN mie PINS PARK mies GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND QE UU BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the auto matic transamission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light
388. y cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires es STARTING AND OPERATING 327 NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information
389. y disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you
390. you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UCon nect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you

Dodge 2008 DR/DH Ram Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents